blob: 89612b9c93a95843cdea5c98fa18d407a67b445c [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 35
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288/**
289 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000290 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000291CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000292
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000293/**
294 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
295 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000296CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000297
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000298/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000299 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
300 * across an indexing session.
301 */
302typedef struct {
303 unsigned long long data[3];
304} CXFileUniqueID;
305
306/**
307 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
308 *
309 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
310 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
311 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
312 * otherwise returns 0.
313*/
314CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
315
316/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000317 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
318 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000319 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000320 */
321CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
322clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
323
324/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000325 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
326 *
327 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000328 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000329 * \param file_name the name of the file.
330 *
331 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
332 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
333 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000334CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000335 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000336
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000337/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000338 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
339 * or they are both NULL.
340 */
341CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
342
343/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000344 * @}
345 */
346
347/**
348 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
349 *
350 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
351 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
352 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
353 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
354 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
355 * specific location information from those data types.
356 *
357 * @{
358 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000359
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000360/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000361 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
362 * unit.
363 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000364 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000365 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000366 */
367typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000368 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000369 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000370} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000371
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000372/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000373 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000374 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000375 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
376 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000377 */
378typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000379 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000380 unsigned begin_int_data;
381 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000382} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000383
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000384/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000385 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
386 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000388
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000389/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000390 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000391 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000392 * code.
393 *
394 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
395 * if they refer to different locations.
396 */
397CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
398 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000399
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000400/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000401 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
402 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000403 */
404CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
405 CXFile file,
406 unsigned line,
407 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000408/**
409 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
410 * in a particular translation unit.
411 */
412CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
413 CXFile file,
414 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000415
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000416/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000417 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
418 */
419CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
420
421/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000422 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
423 * the corresponding translation unit.
424 */
425CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
426
427/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000428 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
429 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000430CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000431
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000432/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000433 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
434 * locations.
435 */
436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
437 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000438
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000439/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000440 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
441 *
442 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
443 */
444CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
445 CXSourceRange range2);
446
447/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000448 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000449 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000450CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000451
452/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000453 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
454 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000455 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000456 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
457 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000458 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000459 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
460 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000461 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000462 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000463 * source location points.
464 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000465 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000466 * source location points.
467 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000468 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
469 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000470 *
471 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
472 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000473 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000474CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
475 CXFile *file,
476 unsigned *line,
477 unsigned *column,
478 unsigned *offset);
479
480/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000481 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
482 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
483 *
484 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
485 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000486 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000487 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
488 *
489 * static int func(void)
490 * {
491 * return 0;
492 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000493 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000494 *
495 * the location information returned by this function would be
496 *
497 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
498 *
499 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
500 *
501 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
502 *
503 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
504 * into its parts.
505 *
506 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
507 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
508 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
509 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
510 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
511 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
512 * source location, an empty string is returned.
513 *
514 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
515 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
516 *
517 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
518 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
519 */
520CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
521 CXString *filename,
522 unsigned *line,
523 unsigned *column);
524
525/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000526 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
527 * by the given source location.
528 *
529 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000530 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000531 * details.
532 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
534 CXFile *file,
535 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000536 unsigned *column,
537 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000538
539/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000540 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
541 * the given source location.
542 *
543 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
544 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
545 *
546 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
547 * into its parts.
548 *
549 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
550 * source location points.
551 *
552 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
553 * source location points.
554 *
555 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
556 * source location points.
557 *
558 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
559 * buffer to which the given source location points.
560 */
561CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
562 CXFile *file,
563 unsigned *line,
564 unsigned *column,
565 unsigned *offset);
566
567/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000568 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
569 * the given source location.
570 *
571 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
572 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
573 * a macro argument.
574 *
575 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
576 * into its parts.
577 *
578 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
579 * source location points.
580 *
581 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
582 * source location points.
583 *
584 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
585 * source location points.
586 *
587 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
588 * buffer to which the given source location points.
589 */
590CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
591 CXFile *file,
592 unsigned *line,
593 unsigned *column,
594 unsigned *offset);
595
596/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000597 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
598 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000599 */
600CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
601
602/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000603 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
604 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000605 */
606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
607
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000608/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000609 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000610 */
611typedef struct {
612 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
613 unsigned count;
614 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000615 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000616 */
617 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000618} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000619
620/**
621 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000622 *
623 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
624 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000625 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000626CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
627 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000628
629/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000630 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000631 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000632CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000633
634/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000635 * @}
636 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000637
638/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000639 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
640 *
641 * @{
642 */
643
644/**
645 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
646 */
647enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
648 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000649 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000650 * option.
651 */
652 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000653
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000654 /**
655 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
656 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
657 */
658 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
659
660 /**
661 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
662 * wrong.
663 */
664 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
665
666 /**
667 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
668 */
669 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
670
671 /**
672 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
673 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
674 * results.
675 */
676 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
677};
678
679/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000680 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
681 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
682 */
683typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
684
685/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000686 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
687 */
688typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
689
690/**
691 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
692 */
693CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
694
695/**
696 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
697 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000698 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000699 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
700 *
701 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
702 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
703 */
704CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
705 unsigned Index);
706
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000707/**
708 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
709 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
710 */
711enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
712 /**
713 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
714 */
715 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
716
717 /**
718 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
719 * deserialize diagnostics.
720 */
721 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
722
723 /**
724 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
725 * could not be opened.
726 */
727 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
728
729 /**
730 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000731 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000732 */
733 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
734};
735
736/**
737 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000738 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000739 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
741 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000742 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000743 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
745 *
746 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000747 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000748 */
749CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
750 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
751 CXString *errorString);
752
753/**
754 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
755 */
756CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
757
758/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000759 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
760 *
761 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000762 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000763 */
764CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
765
766/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000767 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
768 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000769 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000770CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
771
772/**
773 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
774 *
775 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
776 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
777 *
778 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
779 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
780 */
781CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
782 unsigned Index);
783
784/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000785 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
786 * translation unit.
787 *
788 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
789 */
790CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
791 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
792
793/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000794 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
795 */
796CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000797
798/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000799 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
800 *
801 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000802 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000803 */
804enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
805 /**
806 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
807 * diagnostic was located.
808 *
809 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
810 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
811 *
812 * \code
813 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
814 * \endcode
815 *
816 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
817 */
818 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
819
820 /**
821 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
822 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
823 *
824 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
825 */
826 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
827
828 /**
829 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
830 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
831 * machine-parsable format.
832 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000833 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000834 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
835 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000836 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
837
838 /**
839 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
840 *
841 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
842 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
843 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
844 */
845 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
846
847 /**
848 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
849 *
850 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
851 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
852 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
853 */
854 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
855
856 /**
857 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
858 *
859 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
860 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
861 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
862 */
863 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000864};
865
866/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000867 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000868 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000870 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
871 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000872 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
873 *
874 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
875 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000876 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000877 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000878 *
879 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000880 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000881CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
882 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000883
884/**
885 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
886 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
887 *
888 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000889 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000890 */
891CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
892
893/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000894 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
895 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000896CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000897clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
898
899/**
900 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
901 *
902 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
903 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
904 */
905CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
906
907/**
908 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
909 */
910CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000911
912/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000913 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
914 * diagnostic.
915 *
916 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
917 *
918 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
919 * diagnostic (if any).
920 *
921 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
922 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
923 */
924CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
925 CXString *Disable);
926
927/**
928 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
929 *
930 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
931 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
932 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
933 *
934 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
935 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
936 */
937CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
938
939/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000940 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
941 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
942 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000943 *
944 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
945 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
946 *
947 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
948 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000949CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
950CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
951
952/**
953 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
954 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000955 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
956 */
957CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000958
959/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000960 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
961 * diagnostic.
962 */
963CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000964
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000965/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000966 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000970 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000972 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000974 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000976 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000978CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000979 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000980
981/**
982 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
983 * given diagnostic.
984 */
985CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
986
987/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000988 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000989 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
991 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
992 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
993 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
994 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
995 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
996 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
997 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
998 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000999 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001000 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1001 *
1002 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1003 *
1004 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1005 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1006 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1007 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1008 *
1009 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1010 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001011 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001012CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001013 unsigned FixIt,
1014 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001015
1016/**
1017 * @}
1018 */
1019
1020/**
1021 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1022 *
1023 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1024 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1025 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1026 *
1027 * @{
1028 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001029
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001030/**
1031 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1032 */
1033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1034clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1035
1036/**
1037 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1038 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1039 *
1040 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1041 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1042 * specified command line arguments.
1043 *
1044 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1045 * are ignored:
1046 *
1047 * '-c'
1048 * '-emit-ast'
1049 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001050 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001051 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001052 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1053 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001054 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001055 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001056 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1057 *
1058 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1059 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1060 *
1061 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1062 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1063 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1064 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001065 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001066 *
1067 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1068 * unsaved_files.
1069 *
1070 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1071 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001072 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1073 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1074 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001075 */
1076CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1077 CXIndex CIdx,
1078 const char *source_filename,
1079 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001080 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001081 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001082 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001083
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001084/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001085 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1086 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1087 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1088 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001089 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001090CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1091 CXIndex CIdx,
1092 const char *ast_filename);
1093
1094/**
1095 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1096 *
1097 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1098 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1099 *
1100 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1101 */
1102CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1103 CXIndex CIdx,
1104 const char *ast_filename,
1105 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001106
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001107/**
1108 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1109 *
1110 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1111 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1112 * constructing the translation unit.
1113 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001114enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1115 /**
1116 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1117 * needed.
1118 */
1119 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1120
1121 /**
1122 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1123 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1124 *
1125 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1126 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1127 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1128 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1129 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1130 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001131 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1132
1133 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001134 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001135 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1137 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1138 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1139 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1140 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1141 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1142 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001143 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001144 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145
1146 /**
1147 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1148 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1149 *
1150 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1151 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1152 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1153 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1154 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1155 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1156 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1157 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1158 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1159 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001160 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1161
1162 /**
1163 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1164 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1165 *
1166 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1167 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1168 * code-completion operations.
1169 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001170 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001171
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1174 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001175 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001176 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1177 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001178 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001179 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180
1181 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001182 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001183 *
1184 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001185 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001186 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001187 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1188
1189 /**
1190 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1191 * parsing.
1192 *
1193 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1194 * ignoring the usages.
1195 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001196 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1197
1198 /**
1199 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1200 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1201 * unit.
1202 */
Benjamin Kramer5c248d82015-12-15 09:30:31 +00001203 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
1204
1205 /**
1206 * \brief Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
1207 * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
1208 * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
1209 * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
1210 */
Manuel Klimek016c0242016-03-01 10:56:19 +00001211 CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100,
1212
1213 /**
1214 * \brief Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered.
1215 *
1216 * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit,
1217 * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common
1218 * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the
1219 * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information
1220 * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior.
1221 */
1222 CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001223};
1224
1225/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001226 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1227 * unit that is being edited.
1228 *
1229 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1230 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1231 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1232 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1233 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1234 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1235 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1236 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001237CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001238
1239/**
1240 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1241 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1242 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1243 * error codes.
1244 */
1245CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1246clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1247 const char *source_filename,
1248 const char *const *command_line_args,
1249 int num_command_line_args,
1250 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1251 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1252 unsigned options);
1253
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001254/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001255 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1256 * to that file.
1257 *
1258 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1259 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1260 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1261 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1262 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1263 *
1264 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1265 * associated.
1266 *
1267 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001268 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001269 *
1270 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1271 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1272 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1273 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001274 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001275 *
1276 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001277 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001278 *
1279 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001280 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001281 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1282 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1283 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1284 *
1285 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1286 * unsaved_files.
1287 *
1288 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1289 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1290 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1291 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001292 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1293 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1294 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1295 *
1296 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001297 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001298CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1299clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1300 const char *source_filename,
1301 const char *const *command_line_args,
1302 int num_command_line_args,
1303 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1304 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1305 unsigned options,
1306 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1307
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001308/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001309 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1310 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1311 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1312 */
1313CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1314 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1315 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1316 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1317 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1318
1319/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001320 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1321 *
1322 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1323 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1324 * saving the translation unit.
1325 */
1326enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1327 /**
1328 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1329 */
1330 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1331};
1332
1333/**
1334 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1335 * unit.
1336 *
1337 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1338 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1339 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1340 * the most commonly-requested data.
1341 */
1342CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1343
1344/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001345 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1346 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1347 */
1348enum CXSaveError {
1349 /**
1350 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1351 */
1352 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1353
1354 /**
1355 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1356 * the file.
1357 *
1358 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1359 * write the file.
1360 */
1361 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1362
1363 /**
1364 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1365 * to save the translation unit.
1366 *
1367 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1368 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1369 */
1370 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1371
1372 /**
1373 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1374 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1375 */
1376 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1377};
1378
1379/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001380 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1381 * that translation unit on disk.
1382 *
1383 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1384 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1385 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1386 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1387 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1388 * units.
1389 *
1390 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001391 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001392 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1393 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001394 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1395 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1396 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1397 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001398 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1399 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1400 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001401 */
1402CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001403 const char *FileName,
1404 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001405
1406/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001407 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1408 */
1409CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001410
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001411/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001412 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1413 *
1414 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1415 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1416 * reparsing the translation unit.
1417 */
1418enum CXReparse_Flags {
1419 /**
1420 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1421 */
1422 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1423};
1424
1425/**
1426 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1427 * unit.
1428 *
1429 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1430 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1431 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1432 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1433 * to the next.
1434 */
1435CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1436
1437/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001438 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1439 *
1440 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1441 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1442 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1443 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1444 * was originally parsed.
1445 *
1446 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1447 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1448 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1449 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1450 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1451 * unit using this routine.
1452 *
1453 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1454 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1455 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1456 *
1457 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1458 * unsaved_files.
1459 *
1460 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1461 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1462 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1463 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1464 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1465 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001466 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1467 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1468 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1469 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001470 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001471 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001472 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1473 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1474 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001475 */
1476CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1477 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001478 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1479 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001480
1481/**
1482 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1483 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001484enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1485 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1486 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1487 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1488 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001489 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001490 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001491 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001492 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1493 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1494 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001495 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1496 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001497 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001498 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001499 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1500 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001501 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001502
1503 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001504 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001505};
1506
1507/**
1508 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001509 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001510 */
1511CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001512const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001513
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001514typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001515 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001516 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1517 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1518 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001519 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001520} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001521
1522/**
1523 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1524 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001526 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1527 void *data;
1528
1529 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1530 unsigned numEntries;
1531
1532 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1533 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001534 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001535
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001536} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001537
1538/**
1539 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001540 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001541 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001542CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001543
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001544CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001545
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001546/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001547 * @}
1548 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001549
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001550/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001551 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1552 */
1553enum CXCursorKind {
1554 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001555 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001556 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001557 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001558 *
1559 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1560 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1561 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1562 * of the declaration is not reported.
1563 */
1564 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1565 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001566 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001567 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1568 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1569 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1570 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1571 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1572 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001573 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001574 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1575 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1576 */
1577 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1578 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1579 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1580 /** \brief A function. */
1581 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1582 /** \brief A variable. */
1583 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1584 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1585 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001586 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001587 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001588 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001589 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001590 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001591 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001592 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001593 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1594 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1595 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1596 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1597 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1598 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1599 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001600 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001601 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001602 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001603 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001604 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001605 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001606 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1607 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001608 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1609 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001610 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1611 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001612 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1613 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1614 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1615 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1616 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1617 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001618 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1619 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1620 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1621 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1622 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1623 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1624 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1625 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001626 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1627 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001628 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1629 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001630 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1631 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001632 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1633 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001634 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001635 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001636 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1637 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001638 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001639 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001640 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001641 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001642 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1643 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001644
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001645 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001646 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001647
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001648 /* References */
1649 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001650 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001651 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1652 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1653 /**
1654 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1655 *
1656 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1657 * declared. For example, given:
1658 *
1659 * \code
1660 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1661 * size_type size;
1662 * \endcode
1663 *
1664 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1665 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1666 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1667 */
1668 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001669 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001670 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001671 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1672 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001673 */
1674 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001675 /**
1676 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1677 */
1678 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001679 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001680 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1681 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001682 */
1683 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001684 /**
1685 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1686 *
1687 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1688 * goto statement in the following example:
1689 *
1690 * \code
1691 * start_over:
1692 * ++counter;
1693 *
1694 * goto start_over;
1695 * \endcode
1696 *
1697 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1698 */
1699 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1700
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001701 /**
1702 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1703 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1704 *
1705 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1706 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1707 *
1708 * \code
1709 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1710 *
1711 * struct X { ... };
1712 * void swap(X&, X&);
1713 *
1714 * template<typename T>
1715 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1716 * while (first < last - 1) {
1717 * swap(*first, *--last);
1718 * ++first;
1719 * }
1720 * }
1721 *
1722 * struct Y { };
1723 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1724 * \endcode
1725 *
1726 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1727 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1728 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1729 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1730 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1731 * example).
1732 *
1733 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1734 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1735 * referenced by this cursor.
1736 */
1737 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1738
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001739 /**
1740 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1741 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1742 */
1743 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1744
1745 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001746
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001747 /* Error conditions */
1748 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1749 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1750 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1751 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001752 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1753 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001754
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001755 /* Expressions */
1756 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001757
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001758 /**
1759 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001760 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001761 *
1762 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1763 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1764 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1765 * expression is not reported.
1766 */
1767 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001768
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001769 /**
1770 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001771 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001772 */
1773 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001774
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001775 /**
1776 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1777 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1778 */
1779 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001780
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001781 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1782 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001783
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001784 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1785 object or class. */
1786 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001787
1788 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1789 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1790
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001791 /** \brief An integer literal.
1792 */
1793 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1794
1795 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1796 */
1797 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1798
1799 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1800 */
1801 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1802
1803 /** \brief A string literal.
1804 */
1805 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1806
1807 /** \brief A character literal.
1808 */
1809 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1810
1811 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1812 *
1813 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1814 */
1815 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1816
1817 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1818 * alignof).
1819 */
1820 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1821
1822 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1823 */
1824 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1825
1826 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1827 * "x <= y".
1828 */
1829 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1830
1831 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1832 */
1833 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1834
1835 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1836 */
1837 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1838
1839 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1840 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1841 *
1842 * For example: (int)f.
1843 */
1844 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1845
1846 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1847 */
1848 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1849
1850 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1851 */
1852 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1853
1854 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1855 */
1856 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1857
1858 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1859 */
1860 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1861
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001862 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001863 */
1864 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1865
1866 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1867 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1868 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1869 *
1870 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1871 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1872 * match the size of a pointer).
1873 */
1874 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1875
1876 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1877 */
1878 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1879
1880 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1881 */
1882 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1883
1884 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1885 */
1886 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1887
1888 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1889 */
1890 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1891
1892 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1893 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1894 *
1895 * Example:
1896 * \code
1897 * x = int(0.5);
1898 * \endcode
1899 */
1900 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1901
1902 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1903 */
1904 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1905
1906 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1907 */
1908 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1909
1910 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1911 */
1912 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1913
1914 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1915 */
1916 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1917
1918 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1919 *
1920 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1921 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1922 */
1923 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1924
1925 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1926 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1927 */
1928 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1929
1930 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1931 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1932 */
1933 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1934
Olivier Goffart692d5332016-06-09 16:16:06 +00001935 /** \brief A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits)
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001936 */
1937 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1938
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001939 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001940 */
1941 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1942
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001943 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001944 */
1945 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1946
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001947 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001948 */
1949 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1950
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001951 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001952 */
1953 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1954
1955 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1956 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1957 *
1958 * \code
1959 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1960 * \endcode
1961 */
1962 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1963
1964 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1965 * expressions.
1966 *
1967 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1968 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1969 *
1970 * \code
1971 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1972 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1973 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1974 * }
1975 * \endcode
1976 */
1977 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1978
1979 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1980 * pack.
1981 *
1982 * \code
1983 * template<typename ...Types>
1984 * struct count {
1985 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1986 * };
1987 * \endcode
1988 */
1989 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1990
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001991 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1992 * object.
1993 *
1994 * \code
1995 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1996 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1997 * [](float a, float b) {
1998 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1999 * });
2000 * }
2001 * \endcode
2002 */
2003 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
2004
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00002005 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
2006 */
2007 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
2008
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002009 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00002010 */
2011 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
2012
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00002013 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
2014 */
2015 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
2016
2017 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002018
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002019 /* Statements */
2020 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2021 /**
2022 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2023 * interface.
2024 *
2025 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2026 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2027 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2028 * reported.
2029 */
2030 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002031
2032 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2033 *
2034 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2035 * the following example:
2036 *
2037 * \code
2038 * start_over:
2039 * ++counter;
2040 * \endcode
2041 *
2042 */
2043 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002044
2045 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2046 *
2047 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2048 * bodies.
2049 */
2050 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2051
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002052 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002053 */
2054 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2055
2056 /** \brief A default statement.
2057 */
2058 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2059
2060 /** \brief An if statement
2061 */
2062 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2063
2064 /** \brief A switch statement.
2065 */
2066 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2067
2068 /** \brief A while statement.
2069 */
2070 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2071
2072 /** \brief A do statement.
2073 */
2074 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2075
2076 /** \brief A for statement.
2077 */
2078 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2079
2080 /** \brief A goto statement.
2081 */
2082 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2083
2084 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2085 */
2086 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2087
2088 /** \brief A continue statement.
2089 */
2090 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2091
2092 /** \brief A break statement.
2093 */
2094 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2095
2096 /** \brief A return statement.
2097 */
2098 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2099
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002100 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002101 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002102 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002103 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002104
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002105 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002106 */
2107 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2108
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002109 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002110 */
2111 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2112
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002113 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002114 */
2115 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2116
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002117 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002118 */
2119 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2120
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002121 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002122 */
2123 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2124
2125 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2126 */
2127 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2128
2129 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2130 */
2131 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2132
2133 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2134 */
2135 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2136
2137 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2138 */
2139 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2140
2141 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2142 */
2143 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2144
2145 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2146 */
2147 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2148
2149 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2150 */
2151 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2152
2153 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2154 */
2155 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2156
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002157 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2158 */
2159 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2160
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002161 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002162 *
2163 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2164 */
2165 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2166
2167 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2168 * expressions.
2169 */
2170 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2171
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002172 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2173 */
2174 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2175
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002176 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002177 */
2178 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2179
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002180 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2181 */
2182 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2183
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002184 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2185 */
2186 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2187
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002188 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2189 */
2190 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2191
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002192 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2193 */
2194 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2195
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002196 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2197 */
2198 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2199
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002200 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2201 */
2202 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2203
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002204 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2205 */
2206 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2207
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002208 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2209 */
2210 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2211
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002212 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2213 */
2214 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2215
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002216 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2217 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002218 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002219
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002220 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2221 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002222 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002223
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002224 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2225 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002226 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002227
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002228 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2229 */
2230 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002231
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002232 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2233 */
2234 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2235
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002236 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2237 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002238 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002239
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002240 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2241 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002242 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002243
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002244 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002245 */
2246 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2247
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002248 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002249 */
2250 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2251
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002252 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2253 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002254 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002255
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002256 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2257 */
2258 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2259
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002260 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002261 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002262 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002263
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002264 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2265 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002266 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002267
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002268 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2269 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002270 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002271
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002272 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2273 */
2274 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2275
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002276 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2277 */
2278 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2279
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002280 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2281 */
2282 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2283
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002284 /** \brief OpenMP distribute directive.
Carlo Bertolli6200a3d2015-12-14 14:51:25 +00002285 */
2286 CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
2287
Samuel Antaodf67fc42016-01-19 19:15:56 +00002288 /** \brief OpenMP target enter data directive.
2289 */
2290 CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261,
2291
Samuel Antao72590762016-01-19 20:04:50 +00002292 /** \brief OpenMP target exit data directive.
2293 */
2294 CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262,
2295
Arpith Chacko Jacobe955b3d2016-01-26 18:48:41 +00002296 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel directive.
2297 */
2298 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263,
2299
Arpith Chacko Jacob05bebb52016-02-03 15:46:42 +00002300 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for directive.
2301 */
2302 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264,
2303
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002304 /** \brief OpenMP target update directive.
2305 */
2306 CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265,
2307
2308 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002309
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002310 /**
2311 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2312 *
2313 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2314 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2315 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002316 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2317
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002318 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002319 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2320 /**
2321 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2322 * interface.
2323 */
2324 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2325
2326 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2327 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002328 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002329 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2330 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002331 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002332 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002333 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002334 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2335 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2336 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002337 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2338 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2339 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2340 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002341 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002342 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
Saleem Abdulrasool8aa0b802015-12-10 18:45:18 +00002343 CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
2344 CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
2345 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_DLLImport,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002346
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002347 /* Preprocessing */
2348 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002349 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002350 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2351 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002352 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002353 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002354 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2355
2356 /* Extra Declarations */
2357 /**
2358 * \brief A module import declaration.
2359 */
2360 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002361 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002362 /**
2363 * \brief A static_assert or _Static_assert node
2364 */
2365 CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002366 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002367 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_StaticAssert,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002368
2369 /**
2370 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2371 */
2372 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002373};
2374
2375/**
2376 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2377 * a translation unit.
2378 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002379 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002380 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2381 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2382 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2383 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2384 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2385 *
2386 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2387 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2388 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2389 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2390 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2391 * source code into the AST.
2392 */
2393typedef struct {
2394 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002395 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002396 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002397} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002398
2399/**
2400 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2401 *
2402 * @{
2403 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002404
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002405/**
2406 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2407 */
2408CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002409
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002410/**
2411 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2412 *
2413 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2414 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2415 */
2416CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2417
2418/**
2419 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2420 */
2421CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002422
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002423/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002424 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002425 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002426CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002427
2428/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002429 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2430 */
2431CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2432
2433/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002434 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2435 */
2436CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2437
2438/**
2439 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2440 */
2441CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2442
2443/**
2444 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2445 * reference.
2446 *
2447 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2448 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2449 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2450 */
2451CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2452
2453/**
2454 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2455 */
2456CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2457
2458/**
2459 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2460 */
2461CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2462
2463/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002464 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2465 */
2466CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2467
2468/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00002469 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
2470 */
2471CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
2472
2473/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002474 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002475 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002476 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002477CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2478
2479/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002480 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2481 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002482 */
2483CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002484
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002485/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002486 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2487 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2488 */
2489CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2490
2491/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002492 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2493 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2494 */
2495CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2496
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002497/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002498 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2499 */
2500enum CXLinkageKind {
2501 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2502 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2503 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2504 /**
2505 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2506 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2507 */
2508 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2509 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2510 CXLinkage_Internal,
2511 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2512 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2513 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2514 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2515 CXLinkage_External
2516};
2517
2518/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002519 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002520 */
2521CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2522
Ehsan Akhgarib743de72016-05-31 15:55:51 +00002523enum CXVisibilityKind {
2524 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2525 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2526 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2527
2528 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2529 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2530 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2531 CXVisibility_Protected,
2532 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
2533 CXVisibility_Default
2534};
2535
2536/**
2537 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2538 *
2539 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2540 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2541 * commandline arguments.
2542 *
2543 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2544 *
2545 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2546 */
2547CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2548
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002549/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002550 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2551 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002552 *
2553 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2554 *
2555 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2556 */
2557CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2558clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2559
2560/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002561 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2562 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2563 */
2564typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2565 /**
2566 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2567 * provides availability information.
2568 *
2569 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2570 */
2571 CXString Platform;
2572 /**
2573 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2574 */
2575 CXVersion Introduced;
2576 /**
2577 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2578 * still available).
2579 */
2580 CXVersion Deprecated;
2581 /**
2582 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2583 * is no longer available.
2584 */
2585 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2586 /**
2587 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2588 */
2589 int Unavailable;
2590 /**
2591 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2592 * suggest replacement APIs.
2593 */
2594 CXString Message;
2595} CXPlatformAvailability;
2596
2597/**
2598 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2599 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2600 *
2601 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2602 *
2603 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2604 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2605 *
2606 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2607 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2608 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2609 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002610 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002611 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2612 *
2613 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2614 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2615 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2616 *
2617 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2618 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2619 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2620 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2621 *
2622 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2623 * \c availability array.
2624 *
2625 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2626 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2627 *
2628 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2629 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2630 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2631 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2632 */
2633CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2634clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2635 int *always_deprecated,
2636 CXString *deprecated_message,
2637 int *always_unavailable,
2638 CXString *unavailable_message,
2639 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2640 int availability_size);
2641
2642/**
2643 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2644 */
2645CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2646clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2647
2648/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002649 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2650 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002651enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002652 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002653 CXLanguage_C,
2654 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002655 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002656};
2657
2658/**
2659 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2660 */
2661CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2662
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002663/**
2664 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2665 */
2666CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2667
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002668/**
2669 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2670 */
2671typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2672
2673/**
2674 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2675 */
2676CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2677
2678/**
2679 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2680 */
2681CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2682
2683/**
2684 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2685 *
2686 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2687*/
2688CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2689 CXCursor cursor);
2690
2691/**
2692 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2693 *
2694 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2695*/
2696CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2697 CXCursor cursor);
2698
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002699/**
2700 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2701 *
2702 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2703 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2704 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2705 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2706 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2707 *
2708 * \code
2709 * class C {
2710 * void f();
2711 * };
2712 *
2713 * void C::f() { }
2714 * \endcode
2715 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002716 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002717 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2718 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002719 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002720 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2721 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2722 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2723 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2724 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2725 *
2726 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2727 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2728 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002729 *
2730 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002731 */
2732CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2733
2734/**
2735 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2736 *
2737 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2738 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2739 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2740 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2741 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2742 *
2743 * \code
2744 * class C {
2745 * void f();
2746 * };
2747 *
2748 * void C::f() { }
2749 * \endcode
2750 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002751 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002752 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2753 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002754 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002755 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2756 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2757 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2758 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2759 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2760 *
2761 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2762 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2763 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002764 *
2765 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2766 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002767 */
2768CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002769
2770/**
2771 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2772 * method.
2773 *
2774 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2775 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2776 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002777 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2778 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2779 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2780 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2781 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2782 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002783 *
2784 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2785 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2786 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2787 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2788 * base classes.
2789 *
2790 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2791 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2792 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2793 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2794 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2795 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2796 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2797 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2798 *
2799 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2800 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2801 * method overrides.
2802 *
2803 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2804 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2805 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2806 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2807 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2808 *
2809 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2810 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2811 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2812 */
2813CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2814 CXCursor **overridden,
2815 unsigned *num_overridden);
2816
2817/**
2818 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2819 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2820 */
2821CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2822
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002823/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002824 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2825 * cursor.
2826 */
2827CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2828
2829/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002830 * @}
2831 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002832
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002833/**
2834 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2835 *
2836 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2837 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2838 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2839 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2840 *
2841 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002842 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002843
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002844/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002845 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2846 * location in the source code.
2847 *
2848 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2849 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002850 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002851 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002852 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002853 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2854 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2855 *
2856 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2857 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002858 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002859CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002860
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002861/**
2862 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2863 * by the given cursor.
2864 *
2865 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002866 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2867 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2868 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002869 * source code.
2870 */
2871CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002872
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002873/**
2874 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002875 * the given cursor.
2876 *
2877 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2878 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002879 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002880 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2881 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2882 * entity was actually used).
2883 */
2884CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002885
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002886/**
2887 * @}
2888 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002889
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002890/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002891 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2892 *
2893 * @{
2894 */
2895
2896/**
2897 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2898 */
2899enum CXTypeKind {
2900 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002901 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002902 */
2903 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2904
2905 /**
2906 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2907 * interface.
2908 */
2909 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2910
2911 /* Builtin types */
2912 CXType_Void = 2,
2913 CXType_Bool = 3,
2914 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2915 CXType_UChar = 5,
2916 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2917 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2918 CXType_UShort = 8,
2919 CXType_UInt = 9,
2920 CXType_ULong = 10,
2921 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2922 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2923 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2924 CXType_SChar = 14,
2925 CXType_WChar = 15,
2926 CXType_Short = 16,
2927 CXType_Int = 17,
2928 CXType_Long = 18,
2929 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2930 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2931 CXType_Float = 21,
2932 CXType_Double = 22,
2933 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2934 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2935 CXType_Overload = 25,
2936 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2937 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2938 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2939 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
Nemanja Ivanovicbb1ea2d2016-05-09 08:52:33 +00002940 CXType_Float128 = 30,
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002941 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2942 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2943
2944 CXType_Complex = 100,
2945 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2946 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2947 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2948 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2949 CXType_Record = 105,
2950 CXType_Enum = 106,
2951 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2952 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002953 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2954 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002955 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002956 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002957 CXType_Vector = 113,
2958 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2959 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002960 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002961 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00002962 CXType_Auto = 118,
2963
2964 /**
2965 * \brief Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword.
2966 *
2967 * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both.
2968 */
2969 CXType_Elaborated = 119
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002970};
2971
2972/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002973 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2974 */
2975enum CXCallingConv {
2976 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2977 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2978 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2979 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2980 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2981 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2982 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2983 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00002984 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002985 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002986 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2987 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00002988 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
John McCall477f2bb2016-03-03 06:39:32 +00002989 CXCallingConv_Swift = 13,
Roman Levenstein35aa5ce2016-03-16 18:00:46 +00002990 CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14,
2991 CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002992
2993 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2994 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2995};
2996
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002997/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002998 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2999 *
3000 */
3001typedef struct {
3002 enum CXTypeKind kind;
3003 void *data[2];
3004} CXType;
3005
3006/**
3007 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
3008 */
3009CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
3010
3011/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00003012 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
3013 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
3014 *
3015 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
3016 */
3017CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
3018
3019/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003020 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
3021 *
3022 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
3023 * returned.
3024 */
3025CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
3026
3027/**
3028 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
3029 *
3030 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
3031 * returned.
3032 */
3033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
3034
3035/**
3036 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
3037 * long long.
3038 *
3039 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
3040 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3041 * must be verified before calling this function.
3042 */
3043CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
3044
3045/**
3046 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
3047 * long long.
3048 *
3049 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
3050 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3051 * must be verified before calling this function.
3052 */
3053CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
3054
3055/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00003056 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
3057 *
3058 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
3059 */
3060CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3061
3062/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003063 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3064 * cursor.
3065 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003066 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3067 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003068 */
3069CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3070
3071/**
3072 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3073 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003074 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3075 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3076 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003077 */
3078CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3079
3080/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003081 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3082 *
3083 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3084 * element descriptions.
3085 */
3086enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3087 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3088 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3089 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3090 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3091 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3092 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3093 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3094 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3095 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3096 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3097 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3098};
3099
3100/**
3101 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3102 * template specialization.
3103 *
3104 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3105 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3106 *
3107 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3108 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3109 * void foo() { ... }
3110 *
3111 * template <>
3112 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3113 *
3114 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3115 */
3116CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3117
3118/**
3119 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3120 *
3121 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3122 * template argument kind is returned.
3123 *
3124 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3125 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3126 * void foo() { ... }
3127 *
3128 * template <>
3129 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3130 *
3131 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3132 * respectively.
3133 */
3134CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3135 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3136
3137/**
3138 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3139 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3140 *
3141 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3142 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3143 * is returned.
3144 *
3145 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3146 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3147 * void foo() { ... }
3148 *
3149 * template <>
3150 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3151 *
3152 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3153 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3154 */
3155CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3156 unsigned I);
3157
3158/**
3159 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3160 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3161 *
3162 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3163 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3164 *
3165 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3166 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3167 * void foo() { ... }
3168 *
3169 * template <>
3170 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3171 *
3172 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3173 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3174 */
3175CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3176 unsigned I);
3177
3178/**
3179 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3180 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3181 *
3182 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3183 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3184 *
3185 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3186 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3187 * void foo() { ... }
3188 *
3189 * template <>
3190 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3191 *
3192 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3193 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3194 */
3195CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3196 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3197
3198/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003199 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003200 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003201 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3202 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003203 */
3204CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3205
3206/**
3207 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3208 *
3209 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3210 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3211 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3212 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3213 */
3214CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3215
3216/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003217 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3218 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3219 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003220 */
3221CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3222
3223/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003224 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
3225 * function like.
3226 */
3227CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
3228
3229/**
3230 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
3231 * builtin one.
3232 */
3233CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
3234
3235/**
3236 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
3237 * inline declaration.
3238 */
3239CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
3240
3241/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003242 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3243 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3244 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003245 */
3246CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3247
3248/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003249 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3250 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3251 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003252 */
3253CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3254
3255/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003256 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003257 */
3258CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3259
3260/**
3261 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3262 */
3263CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3264
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003265/**
3266 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3267 */
3268CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003269
3270/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003271 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
3272 */
3273CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
3274
3275/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003276 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3277 */
3278CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3279
3280/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003281 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3282 *
3283 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3284 */
3285CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3286
3287/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003288 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003289 *
3290 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003291 */
3292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3293
3294/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003295 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003296 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003297 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003298 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003299 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003300CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003301
3302/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003303 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003304 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003305 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3306 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003307 */
3308CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3309
3310/**
3311 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003312 */
3313CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3314
3315/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003316 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003317 *
3318 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003319 */
3320CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3321
3322/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003323 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3324 * otherwise.
3325 */
3326CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3327
3328/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003329 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3330 *
3331 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3332 * an invalid type is returned.
3333 */
3334CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3335
3336/**
3337 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3338 *
3339 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3340 * -1 is returned.
3341 */
3342CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3343
3344/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003345 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3346 *
3347 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3348 */
3349CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3350
3351/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003352 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003353 *
3354 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3355 */
3356CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3357
3358/**
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003359 * \brief Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id.
3360 *
3361 * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3362 */
3363CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T);
3364
3365/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003366 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3367 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3368 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3369 *
3370 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3371 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3372 */
3373enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3374 /**
3375 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3376 */
3377 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3378 /**
3379 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3380 */
3381 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3382 /**
3383 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3384 */
3385 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3386 /**
3387 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3388 */
3389 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3390 /**
3391 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3392 */
3393 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3394};
3395
3396/**
3397 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3398 * standard.
3399 *
3400 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3401 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3402 * is returned.
3403 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3404 * returned.
3405 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3406 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3407 */
3408CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3409
3410/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003411 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3412 *
3413 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3414 */
3415CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3416
3417/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003418 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3419 *
3420 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3421 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3422 * is returned.
3423 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3424 * returned.
3425 */
3426CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3427
3428/**
3429 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3430 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3431 *
3432 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3433 * is returned.
3434 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3435 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3436 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3437 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3438 * If the field's name S is not found,
3439 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3440 */
3441CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3442
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003443/**
3444 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3445 *
3446 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3447 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3448 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3449 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3450 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3451 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3452 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3453 * If the field's name S is not found,
3454 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3455 */
3456CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3457
3458/**
3459 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3460 * declaration.
3461 */
3462CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3463
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003464enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3465 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3466 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3467 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3468 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3469 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3470 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3471};
3472
3473/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003474 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3475 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3476 *
3477 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3478 * further.
3479 */
3480CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3481
3482/**
3483 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3484 * at given index.
3485 *
3486 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3487 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3488 */
3489CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3490
3491/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003492 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3493 *
3494 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3495 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3496 */
3497CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3498
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003499/**
3500 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3501 * bitfield.
3502 */
3503CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3504
3505/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003506 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3507 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3508 */
3509CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3510
3511/**
3512 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3513 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3514 */
3515enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3516 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3517 CX_CXXPublic,
3518 CX_CXXProtected,
3519 CX_CXXPrivate
3520};
3521
3522/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003523 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003524 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003525 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3526 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3527 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003528 */
3529CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3530
3531/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003532 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003533 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003534 */
3535enum CX_StorageClass {
3536 CX_SC_Invalid,
3537 CX_SC_None,
3538 CX_SC_Extern,
3539 CX_SC_Static,
3540 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3541 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3542 CX_SC_Auto,
3543 CX_SC_Register
3544};
3545
3546/**
3547 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3548 *
3549 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3550 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3551 */
3552CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3553
3554/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003555 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3556 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3557 *
3558 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3559 *
3560 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3561 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3562 */
3563CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3564
3565/**
3566 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3567 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3568 *
3569 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3570 *
3571 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3572 * the cursor.
3573 *
3574 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3575 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3576 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3577 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3578 */
3579CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3580 unsigned index);
3581
3582/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003583 * @}
3584 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003585
3586/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003587 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003588 *
3589 * @{
3590 */
3591
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003592/**
3593 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3594 * this function returns the collection element type.
3595 *
3596 */
3597CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3598
3599/**
3600 * @}
3601 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003602
3603/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003604 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3605 *
3606 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3607 * using cursors.
3608 *
3609 * @{
3610 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003611
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003612/**
3613 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3614 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3615 *
3616 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3617 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3618 */
3619enum CXChildVisitResult {
3620 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003621 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003622 */
3623 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003624 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003625 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3626 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3627 */
3628 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3629 /**
3630 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3631 * the same visitor and client data.
3632 */
3633 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3634};
3635
3636/**
3637 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3638 *
3639 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3640 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3641 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3642 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3643 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3644 *
3645 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3646 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3647 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003648typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3649 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003650 CXClientData client_data);
3651
3652/**
3653 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3654 *
3655 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3656 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3657 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3658 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3659 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3660 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003661 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003662 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003663 * definition, have no children).
3664 *
3665 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3666 * child of \p parent.
3667 *
3668 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3669 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3670 *
3671 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3672 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3673 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003674CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003675 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3676 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003677#ifdef __has_feature
3678# if __has_feature(blocks)
3679/**
3680 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3681 *
3682 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3683 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3684 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3685 *
3686 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3687 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3688 */
3689typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3690 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3691
3692/**
3693 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3694 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3695 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa0a35d72016-02-07 18:21:28 +00003696CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3697 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003698# endif
3699#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003701/**
3702 * @}
3703 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003704
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003705/**
3706 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3707 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003708 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003709 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3710 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3711 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3712 *
3713 * @{
3714 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003715
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003716/**
3717 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3718 * by the given cursor.
3719 *
3720 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3721 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3722 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3723 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3724 */
3725CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3726
3727/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003728 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3729 */
3730CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3731
3732/**
3733 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3734 */
3735CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003736 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003737 const char *category_name);
3738
3739/**
3740 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3741 */
3742CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3743 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3744
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003745/**
3746 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3747 * the USR for its containing class.
3748 */
3749CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3750 CXString classUSR);
3751
3752/**
3753 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3754 * the USR for its containing class.
3755 */
3756CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3757 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3758 CXString classUSR);
3759
3760/**
3761 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3762 * for its containing class.
3763 */
3764CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3765 CXString classUSR);
3766
3767/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003768 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3769 */
3770CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3771
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003772/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003773 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3774 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003775 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3776 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003777 *
3778 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3779 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3780 *
3781 * \param options Reserved.
3782 */
3783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3784 unsigned pieceIndex,
3785 unsigned options);
3786
3787/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003788 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3789 *
3790 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3791 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3792 * class template specialization.
3793 */
3794CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3795
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003796/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3797 * entity that it references.
3798 *
3799 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3800 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003801 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003802 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3803 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003804 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003805 */
3806CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003807
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003808/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003809 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3810 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3811 * that entity.
3812 *
3813 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3814 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3815 * definition. For example, given:
3816 *
3817 * \code
3818 * int f(int, int);
3819 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3820 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3821 * int f(int, int);
3822 * \endcode
3823 *
3824 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3825 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3826 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3827 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3828 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3829 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3830 * declaration).
3831 *
3832 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3833 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3834 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3835 */
3836CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3837
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003838/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003839 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3840 * is also a definition of that entity.
3841 */
3842CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3843
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003844/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003845 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3846 *
3847 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3848 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3849 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3850 *
3851 * \code
3852 * struct X;
3853 * struct X;
3854 * struct X {
3855 * int member;
3856 * };
3857 * \endcode
3858 *
3859 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3860 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3861 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3862 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3863 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3864 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3865 *
3866 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3867 */
3868CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3869
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003870/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003871 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3872 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003873 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003874 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003875 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3876 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003877 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003878 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3879 * otherwise.
3880 */
3881CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3882
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003883/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003884 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3885 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003886 *
3887 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003888 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3889 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003890 *
3891 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3892 * method/message, it will return zero.
3893 */
3894CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3895
3896/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003897 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3898 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003899 */
3900CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3901
3902/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003903 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3904 */
3905typedef enum {
3906 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3907 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3908 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3909 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3910 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3911 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3912 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3913 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3914 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3915 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3916 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3917 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
Manman Ren04fd4d82016-05-31 23:22:04 +00003918 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800,
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +00003919 CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003920} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3921
3922/**
3923 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3924 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3925 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3926 *
3927 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3928 */
3929CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3930 unsigned reserved);
3931
3932/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003933 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003934 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003935 */
3936typedef enum {
3937 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3938 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3939 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3940 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3941 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3942 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3943 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3944} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3945
3946/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003947 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3948 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3949 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3950 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003951 */
3952CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3953
3954/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003955 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3956 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003957 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3958 */
3959CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3960
3961/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003962 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3963 */
3964CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3965
3966/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003967 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3968 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3969 * with whitespace in between.
3970 */
3971CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3972
3973/**
3974 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3975 * comment text, including comment markers.
3976 */
3977CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3978
3979/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003980 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3981 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3982 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003983 */
3984CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3985
3986/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003987 * @}
3988 */
3989
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003990/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
3991 *
3992 * @{
3993 */
3994
3995/**
3996 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
3997 */
3998CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
3999
4000/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00004001 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
4002 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
4003 */
4004CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
4005
4006/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004007 * @}
4008 */
4009
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004010/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004011 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
4012 *
4013 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
4014 *
4015 * @{
4016 */
4017
4018typedef void *CXModule;
4019
4020/**
4021 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
4022 */
4023CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
4024
4025/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00004026 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
4027 * exists.
4028 */
4029CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
4030
4031/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004032 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004033 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00004034 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
4035 */
4036CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
4037
4038/**
4039 * \param Module a module object.
4040 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004041 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
4042 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
4043 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004044CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004045
4046/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004047 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004048 *
4049 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
4050 * will return "vector".
4051 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004052CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004053
4054/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004055 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004056 *
4057 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
4058 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004059CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004060
4061/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004062 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004063 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00004064 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
4065 */
4066CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
4067
4068/**
4069 * \param Module a module object.
4070 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004071 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
4072 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004073CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
4074 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004075
4076/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004077 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004078 *
4079 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
4080 *
4081 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
4082 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004083CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004084CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
4085 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004086
4087/**
4088 * @}
4089 */
4090
4091/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004092 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4093 *
4094 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4095 * to C++ language features.
4096 *
4097 * @{
4098 */
4099
4100/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004101 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor.
4102 */
4103CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C);
4104
4105/**
4106 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor.
4107 */
4108CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C);
4109
4110/**
4111 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor.
4112 */
4113CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C);
4114
4115/**
4116 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor.
4117 */
4118CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C);
4119
4120/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004121 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4122 */
4123CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4124
4125/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004126 * \brief Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'.
4127 */
4128CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C);
4129
4130/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004131 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4132 * pure virtual.
4133 */
4134CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4135
4136/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004137 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4138 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004139 */
4140CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4141
4142/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004143 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4144 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4145 * one of the base classes.
4146 */
4147CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4148
4149/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004150 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4151 * declared 'const'.
4152 */
4153CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4154
4155/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004156 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4157 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4158 * the template.
4159 *
4160 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4161 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4162 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4163 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4164 *
4165 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4166 * declaration.
4167 *
4168 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4169 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4170 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4171 */
4172CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4173
4174/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004175 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4176 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4177 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4178 *
4179 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4180 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4181 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4182 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4183 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4184 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4185 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4186 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4187 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4188 *
4189 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4190 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4191 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4192 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4193 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4194 *
4195 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4196 * of a template.
4197 *
4198 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4199 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4200 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4201 */
4202CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004203
4204/**
4205 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4206 * covering that reference.
4207 *
4208 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4209 * an operator call.
4210 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4211 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4212 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4213 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4214 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4215 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004216 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004217 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4218 *
4219 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4220 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4221 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004222CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4223 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004224 unsigned PieceIndex);
4225
4226enum CXNameRefFlags {
4227 /**
4228 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4229 * range.
4230 */
4231 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4232
4233 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004234 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4235 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004236 */
4237 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4238
4239 /**
4240 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4241 *
4242 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4243 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4244 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004245 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004246 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4247 * \endcode
4248 */
4249 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4250};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004251
4252/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004253 * @}
4254 */
4255
4256/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004257 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4258 *
4259 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4260 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4261 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004262 *
4263 * @{
4264 */
4265
4266/**
4267 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4268 */
4269typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4270 /**
4271 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4272 */
4273 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004274
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004275 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004276 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004277 */
4278 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004279
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004280 /**
4281 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4282 */
4283 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004284
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004285 /**
4286 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4287 */
4288 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004289
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004290 /**
4291 * \brief A comment.
4292 */
4293 CXToken_Comment
4294} CXTokenKind;
4295
4296/**
4297 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4298 */
4299typedef struct {
4300 unsigned int_data[4];
4301 void *ptr_data;
4302} CXToken;
4303
4304/**
4305 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4306 */
4307CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004308
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004309/**
4310 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4311 *
4312 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4313 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4314 */
4315CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004316
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004317/**
4318 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4319 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004320CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004321 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004322
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004323/**
4324 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4325 */
4326CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4327
4328/**
4329 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4330 * lexical tokens.
4331 *
4332 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4333 *
4334 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4335 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4336 *
4337 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4338 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4339 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4340 *
4341 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4342 * array.
4343 *
4344 */
4345CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4346 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004347
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004348/**
4349 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4350 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4351 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004352 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4353 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4354 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4355 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4356 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4357 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4358 *
4359 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4360 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4361 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4362 *
4363 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4364 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4365 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4366 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4367 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004368 *
4369 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4370 *
4371 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4372 *
4373 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4374 *
4375 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4376 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4377 */
4378CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4379 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4380 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004381
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004382/**
4383 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4384 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004385CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004386 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004387
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004388/**
4389 * @}
4390 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004391
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004392/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004393 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4394 *
4395 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4396 * be relied upon.
4397 *
4398 * @{
4399 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004400
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004401/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004402CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004403CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4404 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004405 const char **endBuf,
4406 unsigned *startLine,
4407 unsigned *startColumn,
4408 unsigned *endLine,
4409 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004410CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004411CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4412 unsigned stack_size);
4413
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004414/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004415 * @}
4416 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004417
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004418/**
4419 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4420 *
4421 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4422 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4423 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4424 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4425 * routines provide support for code completion.
4426 *
4427 * @{
4428 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004429
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004430/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004431 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4432 *
4433 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4434 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4435 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4436 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4437 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4438 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4439 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4440 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004441 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004442 */
4443typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004444
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004445/**
4446 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4447 */
4448typedef struct {
4449 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004450 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004451 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004452 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004453 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4454 * referring to.
4455 *
4456 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4457 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4458 */
4459 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004460
4461 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004462 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4463 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4464 */
4465 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4466} CXCompletionResult;
4467
4468/**
4469 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4470 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004471 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4472 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004473 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4474 */
4475enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4476 /**
4477 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4478 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4479 *
4480 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004481 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004482 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4483 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4484 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4485 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4486 *
4487 * \code
4488 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4489 * \endcode
4490 *
4491 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4492 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4493 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4494 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4495 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4496 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004497 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004498 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4499 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4500 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4501 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4502 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004503 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004504 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4505 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4506 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4507 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4508 */
4509 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4510 /**
4511 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004512 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004513 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004514 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4515 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004516 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4517 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4518 * chunk.
4519 */
4520 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4521 /**
4522 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4523 *
4524 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4525 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4526 * be selected.
4527 */
4528 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4529 /**
4530 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4531 *
4532 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4533 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4534 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4535 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4536 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4537 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4538 */
4539 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4540 /**
4541 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4542 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004543 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004544 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4545 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4546 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4547 * by code completion.
4548 */
4549 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4550 /**
4551 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4552 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4553 *
4554 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4555 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4556 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4557 *
4558 * \code
4559 * int add(int x, int y);
4560 * \endcode
4561 *
4562 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4563 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4564 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4565 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004566 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004567 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4568 */
4569 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4570 /**
4571 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4572 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4573 */
4574 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4575 /**
4576 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4577 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4578 */
4579 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4580 /**
4581 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4582 */
4583 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4584 /**
4585 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4586 */
4587 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4588 /**
4589 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4590 */
4591 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4592 /**
4593 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4594 */
4595 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4596 /**
4597 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4598 */
4599 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4600 /**
4601 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4602 */
4603 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4604 /**
4605 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4606 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004607 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4608 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004609 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004610 *
4611 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004612 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004613 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4614 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004615 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4616 /**
4617 * \brief A colon (':').
4618 */
4619 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4620 /**
4621 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4622 */
4623 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4624 /**
4625 * \brief An '=' sign.
4626 */
4627 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4628 /**
4629 * Horizontal space (' ').
4630 */
4631 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4632 /**
4633 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4634 * perform indentation.
4635 */
4636 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004637};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004638
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004639/**
4640 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4641 *
4642 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4643 *
4644 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4645 *
4646 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4647 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004648CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004649clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4650 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004651
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004652/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004653 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004654 * completion string.
4655 *
4656 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4657 *
4658 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4659 *
4660 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4661 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004662CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004663clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4664 unsigned chunk_number);
4665
4666/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004667 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004668 * within a completion string.
4669 *
4670 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4671 *
4672 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4673 *
4674 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004675 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004676 */
4677CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4678clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4679 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004680
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004681/**
4682 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4683 */
4684CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4685clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4686
4687/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004688 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4689 *
4690 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4691 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4692 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4693 *
4694 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4695 *
4696 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4697 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4698 */
4699CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4700clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4701
4702/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004703 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4704 * string refers to.
4705 *
4706 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4707 *
4708 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4709 */
4710CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4711clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4712
4713/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004714 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4715 * completion string.
4716 *
4717 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4718 *
4719 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4720 * string.
4721 */
4722CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4723clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4724
4725/**
4726 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4727 *
4728 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4729 *
4730 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4731 * completion string.
4732 *
4733 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4734 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4735 */
4736CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4737clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4738 unsigned annotation_number);
4739
4740/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004741 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4742 *
4743 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4744 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4745 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4746 * or protocol as its context.
4747 *
4748 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4749 * being queried.
4750 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004751 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004752 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004753 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004754 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4755 */
4756CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4757clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4758 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004759
4760/**
4761 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4762 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4763 */
4764CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4765clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4766
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004767/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004768 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4769 * definition cursor.
4770 *
4771 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4772 *
4773 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4774 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4775 */
4776CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4777clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4778
4779/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004780 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4781 *
4782 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004783 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004784 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4785 */
4786typedef struct {
4787 /**
4788 * \brief The code-completion results.
4789 */
4790 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4791
4792 /**
4793 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4794 * \c Results array.
4795 */
4796 unsigned NumResults;
4797} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4798
4799/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004800 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4801 * modify its behavior.
4802 *
4803 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4804 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4805 */
4806enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4807 /**
4808 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4809 * completions returned.
4810 */
4811 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4812
4813 /**
4814 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4815 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4816 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004817 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4818
4819 /**
4820 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4821 * completions returned.
4822 */
4823 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004824};
4825
4826/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004827 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4828 *
4829 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4830 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4831 */
4832enum CXCompletionContext {
4833 /**
4834 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4835 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4836 */
4837 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4838
4839 /**
4840 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4841 */
4842 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4843
4844 /**
4845 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4846 * should be included in the results.
4847 */
4848 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4849 /**
4850 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4851 * be included in the results.
4852 */
4853 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4854 /**
4855 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4856 * should be included in the results.
4857 */
4858 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4859 /**
4860 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4861 * included in the results.
4862 */
4863 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4864
4865 /**
4866 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4867 * operator should be included in the results.
4868 */
4869 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4870 /**
4871 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4872 * operator should be included in the results.
4873 */
4874 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4875 /**
4876 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4877 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4878 */
4879 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4880
4881 /**
4882 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4883 */
4884 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4885 /**
4886 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4887 */
4888 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4889 /**
4890 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4891 */
4892 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4893
4894 /**
4895 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4896 */
4897 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4898 /**
4899 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4900 * included in the results.
4901 */
4902 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4903 /**
4904 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4905 * the results.
4906 */
4907 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4908
4909 /**
4910 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4911 * in the results.
4912 */
4913 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4914 /**
4915 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4916 * the results.
4917 */
4918 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4919 /**
4920 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4921 * the results.
4922 */
4923 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4924 /**
4925 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4926 * in the results.
4927 */
4928 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4929 /**
4930 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4931 * the results.
4932 */
4933 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4934 /**
4935 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4936 * the results.
4937 */
4938 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4939
4940 /**
4941 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4942 * the results.
4943 */
4944 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4945
4946 /**
4947 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4948 */
4949 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4950
4951 /**
4952 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4953 */
4954 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4955};
4956
4957/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004958 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4959 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4960 */
4961CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4962
4963/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004964 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4965 *
4966 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4967 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4968 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4969 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4970 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4971 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4972 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4973 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4974 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4975 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
4976 *
4977 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
4978 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
4979 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
4980 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
4981 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
4982 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
4983 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
4984 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
4985 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
4986 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
4987 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
4988 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
4989 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
4990 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
4991 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
4992 * have a lower latency.
4993 *
4994 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
4995 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
4996 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
4997 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
4998 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
4999 *
5000 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
5001 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
5002 * included in the translation unit.
5003 *
5004 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
5005 *
5006 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
5007 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
5008 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
5009 *
Vedant Kumarcbfe7bb2016-03-23 23:51:36 +00005010 * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005011 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
5012 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
5013 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
5014 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
5015 * this function returns.
5016 *
5017 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
5018 * unsaved_files.
5019 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005020 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
5021 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
5022 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
5023 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
5024 * of code-completion options.
5025 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005026 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
5027 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
5028 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
5029 * completion fails, returns NULL.
5030 */
5031CINDEX_LINKAGE
5032CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5033 const char *complete_filename,
5034 unsigned complete_line,
5035 unsigned complete_column,
5036 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005037 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5038 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005039
5040/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00005041 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
5042 * order.
5043 *
5044 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
5045 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
5046 */
5047CINDEX_LINKAGE
5048void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
5049 unsigned NumResults);
5050
5051/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005052 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
5053 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005054CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005055void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00005056
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005057/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005058 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
5059 * location where code completion was performed.
5060 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005061CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005062unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5063
5064/**
5065 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
5066 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005067 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005068 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
5069 *
5070 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
5071 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
5072 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005073CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005074CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5075 unsigned Index);
5076
5077/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00005078 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005079 * the given code completion.
5080 *
5081 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5082 *
5083 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5084 * along with the given code completion results.
5085 */
5086CINDEX_LINKAGE
5087unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5088 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005089
5090/**
5091 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5092 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5093 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5094 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5095 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5096 *
5097 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5098 *
5099 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5100 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5101 * information, this value will be true.
5102 *
5103 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5104 * container
5105 */
5106CINDEX_LINKAGE
5107enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5108 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5109 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5110
5111/**
5112 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5113 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5114 * function will return the empty string.
5115 *
5116 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5117 *
5118 * \returns the USR for the container
5119 */
5120CINDEX_LINKAGE
5121CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
NAKAMURA Takumiaa13f942015-12-09 07:52:46 +00005122
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005123/**
5124 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5125 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5126 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5127 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5128 *
5129 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5130 *
5131 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5132 * for an Objective-C message send.
5133 */
5134CINDEX_LINKAGE
5135CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5136
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005137/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005138 * @}
5139 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005140
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005141/**
5142 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5143 *
5144 * @{
5145 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005146
5147/**
5148 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5149 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5150 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005151CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005152
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005153/**
5154 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5155 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005156 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5157 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005158 */
5159CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5160
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005161 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005162 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005163 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5164 *
5165 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005166 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005167 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5168 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5169 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5170 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5171 */
5172typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5173 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5174 unsigned include_len,
5175 CXClientData client_data);
5176
5177/**
5178 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5179 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5180 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5181 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5182 */
5183CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5184 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5185 CXClientData client_data);
5186
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005187typedef enum {
5188 CXEval_Int = 1 ,
5189 CXEval_Float = 2,
5190 CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
5191 CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
5192 CXEval_CFStr = 5,
5193 CXEval_Other = 6,
5194
5195 CXEval_UnExposed = 0
5196
5197} CXEvalResultKind ;
5198
5199/**
5200 * \brief Evaluation result of a cursor
5201 */
5202typedef void * CXEvalResult;
5203
5204/**
5205 * \brief If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
5206 * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
5207 * into its corresponding type.
5208 */
5209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
5210
5211/**
5212 * \brief Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
5213 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005214CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005215
5216/**
5217 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
5218 * kind is Int.
5219 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005220CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005221
5222/**
5223 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as double if the
5224 * kind is double.
5225 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005226CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005227
5228/**
5229 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
5230 * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
5231 * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
5232 * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
5233 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005234CINDEX_LINKAGE const char* clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005235
5236/**
5237 * \brief Disposes the created Eval memory.
5238 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005239CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005240/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005241 * @}
5242 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005243
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005244/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5245 *
5246 * @{
5247 */
5248
5249/**
5250 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5251 */
5252typedef void *CXRemapping;
5253
5254/**
5255 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5256 *
5257 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5258 *
5259 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5260 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5261 */
5262CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5263
5264/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005265 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5266 *
5267 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5268 *
5269 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5270 *
5271 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5272 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5273 */
5274CINDEX_LINKAGE
5275CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5276 unsigned numFiles);
5277
5278/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005279 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5280 */
5281CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5282
5283/**
5284 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5285 *
5286 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5287 *
5288 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5289 * is associated with.
5290 */
5291CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5292 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5293
5294/**
5295 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5296 */
5297CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5298
5299/**
5300 * @}
5301 */
5302
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005303/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5304 *
5305 * @{
5306 */
5307
5308enum CXVisitorResult {
5309 CXVisit_Break,
5310 CXVisit_Continue
5311};
5312
Saleem Abdulrasoolec988b72016-05-24 01:23:24 +00005313typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005314 void *context;
5315 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5316} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5317
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005318typedef enum {
5319 /**
5320 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5321 */
5322 CXResult_Success = 0,
5323 /**
5324 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5325 */
5326 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5327 /**
5328 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5329 * CXVisit_Break)
5330 */
5331 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5332
5333} CXResult;
5334
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005335/**
5336 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5337 *
5338 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5339 *
5340 * \param file to search for references.
5341 *
5342 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5343 * each reference found.
5344 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5345 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005346 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005347 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005348 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005349CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5350 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005351
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005352/**
5353 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5354 *
5355 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5356 *
5357 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5358 *
5359 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5360 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005361 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005362 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005363 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005364CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5365 CXFile file,
5366 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005367
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005368#ifdef __has_feature
5369# if __has_feature(blocks)
5370
5371typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5372 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5373
5374CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005375CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5376 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005377
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005378CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005379CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5380 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005381
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005382# endif
5383#endif
5384
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005385/**
5386 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5387 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005388typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005389
5390/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005391 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5392 */
5393typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5394
5395/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005396 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5397 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005398 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005399typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005400
5401/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005402 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5403 * or module).
5404 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005405typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005406
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005407/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005408 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005409 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005410typedef struct {
5411 void *ptr_data[2];
5412 unsigned int_data;
5413} CXIdxLoc;
5414
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005415/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005416 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005417 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005418typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005419 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005420 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005421 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005422 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005423 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005424 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005425 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005426 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005427 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005428 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005429 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005430 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005431 int isImport;
5432 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005433 /**
5434 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5435 * import.
5436 */
5437 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005438} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5439
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005440/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005441 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005442 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005443typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005444 /**
5445 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5446 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005447 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005448 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005449 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5450 */
5451 CXModule module;
5452 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005453 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005454 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005455 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005456 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005457 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005458 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005459 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005460 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005461
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005462} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5463
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005464typedef enum {
5465 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5466 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5467 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5468 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5469 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5470 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5471
5472 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5473 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5474 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5475
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005476 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5477 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5478 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5479 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005480
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005481 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5482 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5483 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005484
5485 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5486 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5487 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5488 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5489 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5490 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005491 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5492 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5493 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5494 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5495 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5496
5497} CXIdxEntityKind;
5498
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005499typedef enum {
5500 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5501 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5502 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5503 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5504} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5505
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005506/**
5507 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5508 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5509 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5510 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5511 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5512 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5513 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5514 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5515 */
5516typedef enum {
5517 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5518 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5519 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5520 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5521} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5522
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005523typedef enum {
5524 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5525 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5526 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5527 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5528} CXIdxAttrKind;
5529
5530typedef struct {
5531 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5532 CXCursor cursor;
5533 CXIdxLoc loc;
5534} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5535
5536typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005537 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5538 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5539 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5540 const char *name;
5541 const char *USR;
5542 CXCursor cursor;
5543 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5544 unsigned numAttributes;
5545} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5546
5547typedef struct {
5548 CXCursor cursor;
5549} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5550
5551typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005552 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5553 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5554 CXCursor classCursor;
5555 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5556} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5557
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005558typedef enum {
5559 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5560} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5561
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005562typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005563 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005564 CXCursor cursor;
5565 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005566 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5567 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005568 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005569 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5570 */
5571 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005572 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005573 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005574 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005575 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005576 /**
5577 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005578 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005579 */
5580 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005581 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5582 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005583
5584 unsigned flags;
5585
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005586} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005587
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005588typedef enum {
5589 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5590 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5591 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5592} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005593
5594typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005595 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005596 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5597} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005598
5599typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005600 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5601 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005602 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005603} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005604
5605typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005606 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5607 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005608 CXIdxLoc loc;
5609} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5610
5611typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005612 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005613 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005614} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005615
5616typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005617 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5618 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5619 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5620} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005621
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005622typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005623 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5624 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5625 CXCursor classCursor;
5626 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5627 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5628} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5629
5630typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005631 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005632 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5633 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5634} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5635
5636typedef struct {
5637 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005638 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5639 unsigned numBases;
5640} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5641
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005642/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005643 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005644 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005645typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005646 /**
5647 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5648 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005649 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005650 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005651 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5652 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005653 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005654 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005655} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5656
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005657/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005658 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005659 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005660typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005661 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005662 /**
5663 * \brief Reference cursor.
5664 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005665 CXCursor cursor;
5666 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005667 /**
5668 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5669 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005670 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005671 /**
5672 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5673 *
5674 * \code
5675 * Foo *var;
5676 * \endcode
5677 *
5678 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005679 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5680 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005681 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005682 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005683 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005684 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005685 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005686 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005687} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5688
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005689/**
5690 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5691 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5692 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005693typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005694 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005695 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5696 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5697 */
5698 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5699
5700 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005701 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005702 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005703 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005704 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005705
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005706 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005707 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005708
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005709 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005710 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005711 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005712 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005713 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005714
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005715 /**
5716 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5717 *
5718 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5719 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005720 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5721 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005722 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005723 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005724 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005725
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005726 /**
5727 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5728 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005729 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005730 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005731
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005732 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005733 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005734
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005735 /**
5736 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5737 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005738 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005739 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005740
5741} IndexerCallbacks;
5742
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005743CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005744CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5745clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005746
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005747CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5748clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5749
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005750CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005751const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5752clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5753
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005754CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5755clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005756
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005757CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5758clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5759
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005760CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5761clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5762
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005763CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5764clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5765
5766/**
5767 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5768 * container.
5769 */
5770CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5771clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5772
5773/**
5774 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5775 * container.
5776 */
5777CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5778clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5779
5780/**
5781 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5782 */
5783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5784clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5785
5786/**
5787 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5788 */
5789CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5790clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5791
5792/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005793 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5794 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005795 */
5796typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5797
5798/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005799 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5800 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005801 *
5802 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5803 */
5804CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5805
5806/**
5807 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5808 *
5809 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5810 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5811 */
5812CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5813
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005814typedef enum {
5815 /**
5816 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5817 */
5818 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5819
5820 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005821 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5822 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5823 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005824 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005825 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5826
5827 /**
5828 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5829 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5830 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005831 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5832
5833 /**
5834 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5835 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5836 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005837 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5838
5839 /**
5840 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5841 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005842 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5843
5844 /**
5845 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005846 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005847 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5848 */
5849 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5850
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005851} CXIndexOptFlags;
5852
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005853/**
5854 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005855 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005856 *
5857 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5858 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5859 *
5860 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5861 * implements.
5862 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005863 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005864 * passed in index_callbacks.
5865 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005866 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5867 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005868 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005869 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5870 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005871 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005872 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005873 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005874 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005875 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005876 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005877 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005878CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005879 CXClientData client_data,
5880 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5881 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5882 unsigned index_options,
5883 const char *source_filename,
5884 const char * const *command_line_args,
5885 int num_command_line_args,
5886 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5887 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5888 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5889 unsigned TU_options);
5890
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005891/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005892 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5893 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5894 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5895 */
5896CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5897 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5898 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5899 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5900 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5901 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5902
5903/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005904 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005905 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005906 *
5907 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5908 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5909 *
5910 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5911 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5912 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5913 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005914 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005915 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005916 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005917 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5918 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005919CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005920 CXClientData client_data,
5921 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5922 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005923 unsigned index_options,
5924 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005925
5926/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005927 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5928 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5929 *
5930 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5931 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5932 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5933 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005934CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005935 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005936 CXFile *file,
5937 unsigned *line,
5938 unsigned *column,
5939 unsigned *offset);
5940
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005941/**
5942 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5943 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005944CINDEX_LINKAGE
5945CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5946
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005947/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005948 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5949 *
5950 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5951 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5952 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5953 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5954 *
5955 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5956 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5957 */
5958typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5959 CXClientData client_data);
5960
5961/**
5962 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5963 *
5964 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5965 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5966 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5967 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5968 *
5969 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5970 *
5971 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5972 * field of \p T.
5973 *
5974 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5975 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
5976 *
5977 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
5978 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5979 */
5980CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
5981 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
5982 CXClientData client_data);
5983
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005984/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005985 * @}
5986 */
5987
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005988/**
5989 * @}
5990 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005991
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005992#ifdef __cplusplus
5993}
5994#endif
5995#endif